Owner's manual | Chrysler 200 CONVERTIBLE 2011 Owner`s manual

Chrysler Group LLC

11C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

291697.ps 11C41-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 09/17/2010 16:27:50

2 0 1 1

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L nf i

200

CONVERTIBLE

Chrysler Group LLC

11C41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2 0 1 1

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

200

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.

Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC

SECTION

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

2

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 4

STARTING AND OPERATING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 5

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 6

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 8

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 9

INDEX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group

LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR

威 parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile

Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

1

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20

䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

▫ Convertible Top Operation Button —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Remote Open Window Feature —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25

▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . 38

䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 46

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 47

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints

(AHR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert 威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

▫ BeltAlert威 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 55

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air

Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 60

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 78

䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

2


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place.

You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with either side up.

Vehicle Key

Ignition Key Removal

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key slightly inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — LOCK

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

4 — START

NOTE:

• If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever into PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.

Opening either door will cancel this feature.

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

2


The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a chime signal to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.

SENTRY KEY 姞

The Sentry Key 威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.

NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning the ignition switch to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 an invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

2

CAUTION!

Always remove the Sentry Key

威 from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.


CAUTION!

The Sentry Key 威 Immobilizer system is not compat- ible with some after-market remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key

威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key

威 Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys 威 by performing the following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key 威 Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within

15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key

威 into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within

60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.

In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.

To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key 威 is programmed. The Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.


Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key 威 contact your authorized dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

2

General Information

The Sentry Key 威 system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.


VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled.

If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes, the horn will sound intermittently, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for another

15 minutes.

Rearming The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

To Arm The System

1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle.

2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch

(one door must be open) or the LOCK button on the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (doors can be open or closed), and close all doors.

NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers.

3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle

Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.

NOTE:

• During the 16-second arming period, if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm.

• Once armed, the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel, the trunk release button on the instrument panel, and the HomeLink

威/Garage

Door Opener (if equipped).

To Disarm The System

Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key 威 into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START position.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle

Security Alarm.


• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will sound.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

2


Tamper Alert

If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have timed out, the park and taillights flash three times, and the horn will chirp three times, when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the

⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position

(extreme bottom position).

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The interior lights will fade to off after approximately

30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position..

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, open the convertible top (if equipped), lower both door and rear quarter windows (if equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

• The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter.

• Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter.

RKE Transmitter With Integrated Key


To Unlock The Doors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First

Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:


Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

2


• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed

RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm

System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-

LOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm

System.

Flash Lights With Lock

The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:






1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed

RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.


3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.


NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.


Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

Illuminated Approach — If Equipped

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.

2


Sound Horn With Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:





• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than

10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.


3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed.


NOTE: If there is no key in the ignition switch, pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

Convertible Top Operation Button — If Equipped

Refer to “Convertible Top Operation” under “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

To Unlatch The Trunk

Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk.

Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped

This feature allows you to remotely lower both door and rear quarter windows at the same time. Lowering the windows using the RKE is a two step operation:

1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once.

2. Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the windows drop to the desired level, then release the button.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the Illuminated Entry system (if equipped) will turn on.


The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises emitted by the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to Sentry Key 威 “Customer Key Programming.”

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

2


• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Battery Service

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.


This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with

RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of a battery is five years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 66 ft (20 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.


• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Trunk closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and

• RKE PANIC button not pressed

2


• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle theft alarm not active

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the

Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later.


Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500

• Any engine warning lamps come on

• Fuel lamp turns on

• The hood is opened

• The hazard switch is pressed

• The transmission is moved out of PARK

• The brake pedal is pressed

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

2


NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one-time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the inside door handle.

Manual Lock Knob

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or

ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.


Power Door Locks

A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door trim panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

2

Power Door Lock Switch


Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The

Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for programming.

Auto Unlock On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.

2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

4. The driver door is opened.

5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

Auto Unlock Door On Exit Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:






1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.

2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/

RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the

LOCK position.


3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.

NOTE: This feature will not be functional until the vehicle has been driven and the shift lever returned to the

PARK position.


NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel operate the door windows and the rear quarter windows.

Power Window Switches

There is a single window control on the passenger’s door trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.

The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and when the accessory delay feature is active.

2


NOTE:

• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts while driving with the windows down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.

Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Smart Glass Feature

The door window will lower slightly if the window is fully up when opening the door. The window will return to its full up position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and top seal damage.

Auto Window Down — If Equipped

The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto-Down feature. These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.

Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch.

For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches

will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature.

For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Reset Window Smart Glass Feature for

Opening/Closing the Door

If the vehicle battery goes dead, the window Smart Glass

Feature for opening and closing the door will be disabled.

To reactivate the window Smart Glass Feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored.


1. Lowering all four windows to the full open position.

2. Press and hold the Power Top Switch in the Close direction. Once the Power Top becomes fully closed, all four windows will start closing.

3. Continue to hold the Power Top Switch an additional two seconds after the windows are fully closed.

4. Push all the window switches down firmly to open the windows completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the passenger door. To disable the window control on the passenger door, press and release the window LOCK button (setting it in the down position). To enable the

2

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE window control, press and release the window LOCK button again (setting it in the up position).

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with one window down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.

If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open both windows together to minimize the buffeting.

Window Lockout Switch

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

To unlatch the trunk lid from inside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

NOTE: The convertible top must be either closed and latched or open and latched to release the trunk.

The trunk release button on the dash will be disabled if the vehicle is locked by pressing the power door lock switch or by pressing the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter. The trunk release

Trunk Release

Button button will be enabled when the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE or if the key is inserted into the ignition and turned to ON/RUN or START.

NOTE: This provides a locked area in the vehicle even if the convertible top is open.


To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press and release the TRUNK RELEASE button on the RKE transmitter two times.

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the word “deck” will display in the odometer indicating the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is pressed.

With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out, the word “deck” will display until the trunk is closed.

On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the words “Trunk Ajar” will display.

2


TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

Trunk Internal Emergency Release

As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency

Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.

In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

Trunk Internal Emergency Release

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint) — if equipped

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHildren (LATCH).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

2


Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!

Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.

(Refer to “Child Restraints”)

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

2. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced

Front Air Bags room to inflate.

4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air

Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

• Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window.

Sit upright in the center of the seat.

• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

2


Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.

Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best.

(Continued)


• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat.


2. The seat belt latch plate is on the outboard side of the front seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

2

Pulling Out The Latch Plate


3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle


• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.


4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, lift up on the shoulder belt and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.

2

Positioning The Lap Belt


WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position.


First Row

Second Row

Driver

N/A

ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable

Center

N/A

N/A

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Passenger

ALR

ALR

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

2


Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If

Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children

12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents.


Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

2


Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If

Equipped

These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.

This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.

However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half

(Soft Foam and Trim)

2 — Seatback

3 — Head Restraint Back Half

(Decorative Plastic Rear

Cover)

4 — Head Restraint Guide

Tubes


CAUTION!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

2

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active

Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle”.

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active

Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).


1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

Hand Positioning Points On AHR

2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.

1 — Downward Movement

2 — Rearward Movement


2

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half.

AHR In Reset Position

NOTE:

• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the

Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.

• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.


Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert 姞)

BeltAlert

威 is a feature intended to remind the driver to fasten their seatbelt. This feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver is unbelted, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver seatbelt is fastened.

The BeltAlert

威 warning sequence begins within 60 seconds of the vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for 96 seconds or until the driver seatbelt is fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seatbelt

Reminder Light remains illuminated until the driver seatbelt is fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts. If the driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph

(8 km/h), BeltAlert 威 will chime once and illuminate the

Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to the

96 second warning sequence.

BeltAlert

姞 Programming

NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert

威.

BeltAlert

威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first

60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the

ON/RUN position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 威.

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, buckle the driver’s seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder

Light to turn off.

3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt three times, ending with the seat belt buckled. This must be completed within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while rebuckling the seat belt.

BeltAlert 威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert 威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.


Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender, and store it.

2


WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-

Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The

SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.


NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolster

• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag

• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

2


• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors

• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and

Front Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air

Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.


When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.

2

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label


Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front

Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.

Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic

ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.

Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.


Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning

Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the

ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

2


WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Inflator Units

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)

Inflator Units

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.

Front And Side Impact Sensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the

ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 event the ORC will determine whether to have the

Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

2


If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)



• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

2


Air Bag Warning Light

You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The

Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.


To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the

United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the front.

2


WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

Infants And Child Restraints

• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to

“Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

WARNING!

Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger air bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and

Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.


The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.

2


• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

(Continued)


• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint:

• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.

• All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.

WARNING!

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts. The two rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating

LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments or fixed lower attachments.

Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing

2


LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belts. If your child restraints are not

LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-

Compatible Child Restraint System”.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchors

Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchors

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also

have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.


Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position. Access ports to the tether anchors are located in the panel between the rear seat and the rear window. The

2

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE tether anchors are underneath access covers in the carpet covering the back of the seat where you see this symbol.

Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material. Then, rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint, push the tether strap and hook through the access port and down into the trunk. Open the access cover on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor. Be careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belts

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to

“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.

First Row

Second Row

Driver

N/A

ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable

Center

N/A

N/A

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Passenger

ALR

ALR

2


Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:

1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.

• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

1. If lowered, raise the convertible top.

NOTE: The convertible top must be in the UP position to access the tether anchor.

2. Open the access port cover (A) behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.


4. Open the access cover (C) on the carpet covering the back of the seat and attach the tether strap hook (D) to the anchor.

2

Child Tether Access Port Cover

3. Push the tether strap and hook (B) through the access port and down into the trunk.

NOTE: Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path from the child seat to the anchor.

Child Tether Anchor

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.


WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL

OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)



• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.


2


Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.


Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

2

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners.

(Continued)



• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al- ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.

(Continued)


• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.


Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

2

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

▫ Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions . . . . 90

▫ Cargo Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

▫ Power Convertible Top Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 96

▫ Lowering The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . 96

▫ Raising The Power Convertible Top . . . . . . . . 97

▫ Wind Stop — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

▫ Power Convertible Top Operation And

Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Emergency Bypass Mode

(To Raise The Top Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 108

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

3

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 111

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Things You Should Know About Your

Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Easy Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . 152

䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 158

▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . 159

▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 161

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

▫ Headlights With Wipers

(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . 167

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 168

䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 169

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

3


▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 176

▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

▫ Reprogramming A Single

HomeLink 威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

▫ Front Seat Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Glove Box Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 183

䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

▫ Ski Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam- age the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.

• Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.

• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.


WARNING!

The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision.

3

You can lower or raise the power convertible top from inside the vehicle or lower the top remotely using the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Either operation takes approximately 30 seconds. The entire process, including unlatching or latching the top at the windshield header is automatic.

The top does take up some space in the trunk when retracted. However, the trunk will still hold a significant amount of cargo.


When operating the power convertible top, the trunk lid will pivot at the rear of the vehicle, swing open by the rear window, and then pivot backward. This allows room for the top to retract into or unfold from its stowage area in the trunk.

When lowering the top, the system extends the hard tonneau cover, which stows conveniently underneath the trunk lid. The tonneau cover closes the area between the rear seats and the trunk lid to conceal the top when stowed.

When raising the top, the system retracts the hard tonneau cover back into its stowage area underneath the trunk lid.

To complete either operation, the trunk lid returns to its normal position and then latches.

Spring-loaded flipper doors, which provide clearance for the linkage, close off notches in the quarter trim panels when the top is down.

Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is stationary, the cargo shield is positioned correctly, and the trunk lid is closed and latched. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower, However, the system allows you to raise the top at ambient temperatures as low as -40°F (-40°C).

• Do not attempt to lower the top when frost, ice, or snow may be present, this could cause damage or prevent the top from stowing completely.

• The Power Top Control Module (PTCM) monitors and controls lowering and raising of the top. A series of micro-switches verify that operations are complete before allowing the next stage of lowering or raising operation.

• Opening and closing the top consecutively without the engine running may run the battery down.

• If a fluttering noise is heard from the rear seat belts while driving with the top down, safely bring the vehicle to a stop and buckle the rear seat belts over the empty seats. This will keep tension on the seat belts and remove the fluttering condition.

CAUTION!

• Correctly position the cargo shield in the trunk before stowing the top. Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation (stowing) to proceed. If the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.

• Always place items carefully into the trunk.

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not push items too far into the trunk, particu- larly when the top is retracted into its stowage area in the trunk.

• Do not use the area on top of the tonneau cover for storage.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, cargo shield, and the vehicle interior.

CAUTION!

Before operating the power top:

• Always check on top of the tonneau cover area to be sure that it is clear of debris or other items.

• Make sure the ambient temperature is above 0°F

(-18°C).

(Continued)

3



• Never attempt to lower a frozen convertible top.

Wait until the top is thawed before lowering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering a cloth top at temperatures below 32°F (0°C) should be avoided.

• Make sure the convertible top is dry before low- ering it into the stowage compartment. Lowering the top when damp, wet, or dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside of your vehicle.

• Make sure there is sufficient clearance of at least

7.5 ft. (2.2 m) for the top to move up.

• To prevent striking a low ceiling or automatic door opener with the top, it is strongly recommended that you do not operate the power top inside a garage or parking structure.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior.

CAUTION!

• Do not operate the power top with the hydraulic pump valve open.

• Do not allow the top to remain in the suspended position. After approximately 10 minutes in the suspended position, the hydraulic pressure will release, which will allow the top and the trunk lid to lower. Pressing the power top switch will cancel this operation.

• Always use a normal ice scraper to remove snow or ice from the rear window. Use of a sharp object or other tools could scratch the panels (hard top) or tear the fabric (soft top) when removing snow or ice.

(Continued)


• Always close the top when leaving your vehicle so as not to leave the interior exposed to potentially damaging outdoor conditions.

• Do not leave the top lowered for several weeks at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out. This is especially important if the top was stowed when not completely dry.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the convertible top components, trunk contents, and the vehicle interior:


WARNING!

Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you:

• Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal.

• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top.

• When using the power top button on RKE trans- mitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.

(Continued)

3



• When using the power top switch on the instru- ment panel, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.

• When using the power top switch on the instru- ment panel, if potential danger exists while raising the top, release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation.

• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment.

• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion.

Cargo Shield

The cargo shield is located in the trunk. Before lowering the convertible top, you must unfold the cargo shield and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner. Doing so closes a switch that allows top operation. If the switch is not closed, a warning message displays in the instrument cluster to notify the driver.

Positioning The Cargo Shield For Top Operation

Pull the cargo shield toward you to begin unfolding the panels. Grasp the handle in the center of the outermost

(top) panel and raise the cargo shield. Then, align and seat the tabs at each end of the cargo shield in the V slots in the trunk liner as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION!

Do NOT place items on top of the cargo shield. Items placed on cargo protector will interfere with the top during operation and cause excessive damage to the top and cargo shield.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 forward onto the horizontal panel, then grasp both panels and lift them to the forward, upright position in the trunk.

3

Cargo Shield

Positioning The Cargo Shield For Cargo Storage

To maximize the storage space in the trunk, the cargo shield can be stowed in the forward portion of the trunk.

To stow the cargo shield, grasp the handle of the upright panel of the cargo shield, lifting the pins out of the V slots in the trunk trim. Continue folding the upright panel

Stowed Cargo Shield

NOTE: The convertible top will NOT operate with the cargo shield in the stowed position.


Power Convertible Top Controls

The power top switch is located on the front of the center console.

There is also a power top button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter for remotely lowering the power convertible top.

Power Top Button

Lowering the Power Convertible Top

Using The Power Top Switch

NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay.

There are two Top Down switch positions.

Press and hold the switch to the first detent.

The system will lower all fully raised windows approximately 0.5 in (10 mm), lower the top to its fully retracted position, and then raise the windows.

Press and hold the switch to the second detent. The system will lower all four windows and the top to their fully retracted positions.

The driver has to press and hold the convertible top switch during the entire opening cycle, if there is an obstruction and the driver is alerted, the convertible top operation can be stopped by releasing the switch.

Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

NOTE: Steps 1 – 3 must be performed within five seconds.

1. Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

2. Press and release the POWER TOP button on the RKE transmitter.

3. Press and hold the POWER TOP button until the

Power Top and All Windows Down feature is complete.


Raising The Power Convertible Top

Using The Power Top Switch

NOTE: The power top switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and when in the power accessory delay.

Press and hold the switch in the Top Up position until the operation of raising the top and latching it is complete, which is indicated by the system raising the windows and displaying “TOP DONE” in the odometer or “CONVERT-

IBLE TOP COMPLETE” in the EVIC (if equipped).

Using The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

You cannot use the power top button on the RKE transmitter to raise the power convertible top. You must use the power top switch inside the vehicle to perform this operation.

3


Manually

Closing the power convertible top manually is a complicated and physically demanding procedure, and it requires a special tool to do so. In the event that you experience a malfunction when operating the power convertible top:

1. Read all of the Notes, Cautions, and Warning found under “Power Convertible Top Usage Precautions” to verify all operating conditions are met.

2. Check for Operation and Warning Messages as described under “Power Convertible Top Operation and

Warning Messages.” If applicable, perform the related action to correct the condition present.

3. If Steps 1 and 2 do not resolve the problem, refer to

“Emergency Bypass Mode”.

Wind Stop — If Equipped

The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.

The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.

However, when not in use, the Wind Stop folds to allow for convenient storage underneath the cargo shield in the trunk.

NOTE: It is recommended that you lower the convertible top before installing or removing the Wind Stop.

Installing The Wind Stop

1. Remove the Wind Stop from the trunk.

2. Unfold the Wind Stop framework.

3. Lay the small frame (1) flat on top of the large frame

(2) and snap the two frames together by engaging the frame lock (3).

NOTE: The frames must lie flat on each other in order to snap them together.


4. Pivot the small frame (1) away from the large frame (2) until the pivot lock (3) engages to lock the two frames in an L shape.

3


5. Unfold both stems at the rear of the large frame.

6. Align and insert the stems into the slot in each trim panel.

7. Align the pins at the front of the large frame with the hole in each trim panel. Slide the pins outward until fully extended into each hole.


Removing And Storing The Wind Stop

Reverse the installation procedure to remove, fold, and store the Wind Stop. However, note the following before doing so:

Disengage the pivot lock (1) to fold the small frame flat onto the large frame. Disengage the frame lock (2) to disconnect the small frame from the large frame.

3


Power Convertible Top Operation And Warning Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the PTCM displays various power convertible top operation and warning messages in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – if equipped, or in the Odometer for vehicles not equipped with the EVIC. Refer to the following chart for message related information:

EVIC

Message 〫

CONVERT-

IBLE TOP

NOT SE-

CURED

CONVERT-

IBLE TOP

COM-

PLETE

EVIC

Message

Display

Time 〫

Until Operation is

Complete

9 sec.

Odometer

Message

(< 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

TOP nOT

SECUrE

TOP

DONE

Odometer

Message

Display

Time 〫〫

Until Operation is

Complete

Display

Scrolls for

6 sec.

Odometer

Message

(> 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

—

—

Odometer

Message

Display

Time 〫〫

—

—

Chime

—

Single

Chime

Condition

The System is

Lowering or

Raising the

Top

The System

Completes

Operation of

Lowering or

Raising the

Top

Operator

Action

Required

—

—

EVIC

Message

〫

EVIC

Message

Display

Time

〫

SECURE

CARGO

SHIELD

9 sec.

CONVERT-

IBLE TOP

NOT SE-

CURED

Until Operation is

Complete

Odometer

Message

(< 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

SET

CARGO

SHIELD

Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

Display

Scrolls for

9 sec.

Odometer

Message

(> 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

—


Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

—

Chime

Single

Chime

Condition Operator

Action

Required

TOP nOT

SECUrE

Until Operation is

Complete

TOP nOT

SECUrE

Until Operation is

Complete

Single

Chime

The Top Fails to Move

When Operating the Power

Top Control

The System

Fails to Complete Operation of Lowering or Raising the Top

Position the Cargo

Shield in the Trunk to Allow

Top Operation

Cycle

Power

Top Control

3


EVIC

Message

SPEED

〫

TOO HIGH

EVIC

Message

Display

Time

〫

9 sec.

Odometer

Message

(< 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

SPEED

TOO

HIGH

Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

Display

Scrolls for

9 sec.

Odometer

Message

(> 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

TOP

Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

6 sec.

Chime

Single

Chime

TRUNK

AJAR

Continuous

DECK Continuous

DECK Continuous

Single

Chime

Condition Operator

Action

Required

You Are Operating the

Power Top at a Vehicle

Speed Greater

Than 0 mph

(0 km/h)

The Trunk Lid is Unlatched or Open

The Top

Will Not

Operate

Unless the

Vehicle is

Stationary.

The Top

Will Not

Operate

Unless the

Trunk Lid is Closed

EVIC

Message

〫

CONVERT-

IBLE TOP

MAL-

FUNC-

TION

EVIC

Message

Display

Time

〫

6 sec.

Odometer

Message

(< 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

TOP FAIL Display

Scrolls for

6 Seconds

CONVERT-

IBLE TOP

MAL-

FUNC-

TION

Until

Fault is

No Longer Detected or

Repaired

TOP FAIL Display

Scrolls until Fault is No Longer Detected or

Repaired

〫 If so equipped.

〫〫 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC.

Odometer

Message

(> 5 mph

[8 km/h])

〫〫

TOP

TOP


Odometer

Message

Display

Time

〫〫

6 sec.

Chime

Single

Chime

Display

Flashes until Fault is No Longer Detected or

Repaired

Single

Chime

Condition

The PTCM

Activated the

System

LOCKOUT

Feature

The PTCM

Activated the

System

LOCKOUT

Feature

Operator

Action

Required

Refer to

Foot Note

〫〫〫

See your authorized dealer for service

3


〫〫〫 The PTCM will lockout the power convertible top system if the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, or the battery is run down, or the hydraulic pump is overheating. In addition, the system prohibits lowering the top when ambient temperature is at 0°F (-18°C) or lower and raising the top when ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C).

• If you are trying to lower the top and ambient temperature is 0°F (-18°C) or lower, wait until the temperature rises and the top is thawed and dry before operating the power top. A soft top should not be lowered at temperatures below 32°F (0°C).

• If you are trying to raise the top and ambient temperature is below -40°F (-40°C), wait until the temperature rises before operating the power top.

• If the vehicle charging system is malfunctioning, see your authorized dealer for service.

• If the battery is run down, have it recharged and tested at your authorized dealer.

• Hydraulic pump overheating can occur if you lower and raise the top consecutively (usually more than six or seven times depending upon the ambient temperature). Wait at least five minutes before operating the power top again. NOTE: If lockout occurs due to hydraulic pump overheating, the system will allow you to raise the top without waiting five minutes. However, do so only if necessary.


Emergency Bypass Mode

(To Raise The Top Only)

This procedure is only to be used to raise the top when the top cannot be returned to the UP (raised) position by pressing the POWER TOP switch or is in a position in which the vehicle cannot be driven. Please follow these emergency bypass instructions to return the top to the UP

(raised) position.

Press the POWER TOP switch in the Top Up direction five times within two seconds and hold the switch in the

Top Up position for a minimum of two minutes.


• Using the Emergency Bypass Mode could poten- tially damage the convertible top and should only be used to raise the power top to the UP (raised) position when the normal top operation is not functioning.

If damage starts to occur while in the Emergency Bypass

Mode, immediately release the power top switch and see your authorized dealer.

NOTE: This procedure may take more time to fully raise and close the power top. It is not uncommon to see delays of up to 30 seconds before operation begins.

CAUTION!

• Once this procedure has been completed and the top is in the UP (raised) position, see your authorized dealer. DO NOT exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).

(Continued)

3


MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate.

Auto Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.


Power Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door trim. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

3

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Power Mirror Switch


After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. When finished, return the knob to the center “O” (Off) position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Vanity Mirror — If Equipped

A vanity mirror is attached to the inside face of the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and flip the mirror cover upward.

Mirror Directions

Vanity Mirror

Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ

“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth

威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones.

For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following websites:

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect

• www.dodge.com/uconnect

• www.jeep.com/uconnect

• or call 1–877–855–8400

3


Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.

The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your

Bluetooth

威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.

Uconnect™ features Bluetooth

威 technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so

Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in

English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.

Uconnect™ Phone Button

The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) will contain the two control buttons

(Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice

Command button) that will enable you to access the system. When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.

Voice Command Button

Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the

“Operation” section.

The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free

Profile certified Bluetooth

威 mobile phone. See the

Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on certain radios.


Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™

Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most

Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another prompt.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then

“Pair a Device”, the following compound command can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth 威 Device”.

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For

3

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions.

Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.

Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone

To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth

威 enabled mobile phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The

Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone pairing instructions:

• Press the button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Device Pairing”.

• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device” and follow the audible prompts.

• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.

• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the

Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to

“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

Dial By Saying A Number



“Dial”.

• The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.

• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.

3


• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.

Call By Saying A Name



“Call”.

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your

Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.

• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.



“Phonebook New Entry”.

• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” instead of “Bob”.

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,

“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.

• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.


Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook

Transfer From Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,

Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth

威 Phones with Phone Book

Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ website for supported phones.

• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in

“Call by Saying a Name” section.

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth 威 wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.

• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect™ Phone.

3


• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.

• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.

SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next phone connection.

Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries

NOTE:

• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.



“Phonebook Edit Entry”.

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add “John

Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit

Entry” feature.

Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.



“Phonebook Delete”.


• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List

Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the button while the

Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say

“Delete”.

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.

• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.


3


Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries



“Phonebook Erase All”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.

• Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.


List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook



“Phonebook List Names”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.

• To call one of the names in the list, press the button during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call”.

NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” operations at this point.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your

mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call

Currently In Progress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the

Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call

Currently In Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling

Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this section.

3


Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call While Current

Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established, press and hold the button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

Redial



“Redial”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the

Uconnect™ Phone.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.


• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.

• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.

Uconnect™ Phone Features

3

Language Selection

To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is using:


• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to

English, Espanol, or Francais.

• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.


After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:



“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and

Mexico.

NOTE:

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.

• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.

WARNING!

To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:

• turned on,

• paired to the Uconnect™ System,

• and have network coverage.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance:



“Towing Assistance”.

NOTE:

• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-

2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-

3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside


Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour

“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour

Towing Assistance references.

• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated

Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working with Automated Systems”.

3


Working With Automated Systems

This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the

Uconnect™ Phone.

When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.

You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.

The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations. This is normal.

• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.

Barge In — Overriding Prompts

The “Voice Command” button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™

Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).


• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say one of the following:

− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”

− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”


Phone And Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth 威 mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

3


NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)

When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

• Press the button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute”.

In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:


• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the

Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button and say “Transfer Call”.

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The

Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone

Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth

威 connection between your mobile phone and the

Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

List Paired Mobile Phone Names



“Setup Phone Pairing”.

• When prompted, say “List Phones”.

• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone being announced, press the button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.


Select Another Mobile Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.



“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.

• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the

Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones


3



“Setup Phone Pairing”.

• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the prompts.

• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™

Phone

Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™

Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:

From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):

• Press and hold the the session begins, or, button for five seconds until

• Press the button and say the “Voice Training,

System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.

You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Reset

• press the button.

• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say

“Setup”, then “Reset”.

This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.

Voice Command

• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 ⁄

2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.


• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.

• Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

3


• When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.

• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

Far End Audio Performance

• Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather conditions, and

• operation from the driver’s seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect™ Phone.

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

Recent Calls

If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

SMS

Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on your phone.


Read Messages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message.

If you wish to hear the new message:



“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”

• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for you.

After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” the message using Uconnect™ Phone.

3


Send Messages:

You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send a new message:



“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”

• You can either say the message you wish to send or say

“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.

To send a message, press the button while the system is listing the message and say “Send.”

Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to.

List of Preset Messages:

1. Yes

2. No

3. Where are you?

4. I need more direction.

5. L O L

6. Why

7. I love you

8. Call me

9. Call me later

10. Thanks

11. See You in 15 minutes

12. I am on my way

13. I’ll be late

14. Are you there yet?

15. Where are we meeting?

16. Can this wait?

17. Bye for now

18. When can we meet

19. Send number to call

20. Start without me

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages.




“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you will then be given a choice to change it.

Bluetooth

威 Communication Link

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the

Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in

Bluetooth 威 ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the

ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.

3



3


Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all

Voice Commands

Alternate(s)


Voice Commands

Primary call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit

Alternate(s) emergency

English erase all

Espanol

Francais help home

3


Voice Commands

Alternate(s) Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial pairing phone book

Voice Commands

Primary return to main menu

Alternate(s) return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call

Uconnect™ Tutorial try again voice training work yes


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.


• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.


NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface

System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws. All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.

Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death.

3

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

Voice Command System Operation

This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.

When you press the Voice Command button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.


If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the Voice Command button, listen for the beep, and say your command.

Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,

“Help” or “Main Menu”.

These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice

Command button and say “Help” or “Main

Menu”.

Commands

The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.

Changing the Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button.

2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for

Voice Command is different than the audio system.

Main Menu

Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)

• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)

• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)


Radio AM

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Radio FM

To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

3


• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)


Satellite Radio

To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite

Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number)

• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)


Disc

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Track” (#) (to change the track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)


Memo

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

− “Save” (to save the memo)

− “Continue” (to continue recording)

− “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)

— During the playback you may press the Voice

Command button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

− “Next” (to play the next memo)

− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

− “Delete” (to delete a memo)

• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

Setup

To switch to system setup, you may say on of the following:

• “Change to setup”


• “Switch to system setup”

• “Change to setup”

• “Main menu setup” or

• “Switch to setup”

In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “Language English”

• “Language French”

• “Language Spanish”

• “Tutorial”

• “Voice Training”

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice

Command button first and wait for the beep before speaking the “Barge In” commands.

3


Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™

Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.

1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System

Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice

Training.” This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by

Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.


Power Seats

The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.

Power Seat Switch


Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

3


WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under any seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.

Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for

HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select

LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system automatically switches to LOW-level heating and turns one indicator light OFF after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light OFF after a maximum of

45 minutes of continuous operation. If LOW-level heating is selected, the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.


WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

3

Recliner Adjustment

The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.


Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position.

Seatback Adjustment

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.

Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Lumbar Support — If Equipped

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The control lever is on the inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

Lumbar Support


Easy Entry System

The Easy Entry lever is located on upper seat belt anchor cover.

3

Easy Entry Lever

Pull the lever upward to move the seat and seatback forward.


When returning the seat to its normal position, the memory feature restores the seat position and seatback recline position to their current settings.

On the driver seat, pull the lever upward to move the seatback forward.

When returning the seatback to its normal position the memory feature restores the seatback recline position to its current setting.

Adjusting Active Head Restraints

Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Adjusted Head Restraint

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint (on some models, you may need to press the push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.


3

Push Button

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)


Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

NOTE:

• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active

Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.

(Continued)


• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head

Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable

DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.

• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head

Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the

Active Head Restraint is deployed.


TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.

3

Hood Release Lever


2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and lift the secondary latch underneath the center front edge of the hood and raise the hood.

Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood.

Hood Prop Rod Hole Location

Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights

(if equipped).

3

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights, parking

Multifunction Lever


Headlights And Parking Lights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation.

Headlight Switch

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the Headlight Time

Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic

System off, turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.

Headlights With Wipers

(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.

In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped

This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.


To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time.

If you turn the headlights, parking lights, or ignition switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3


Instrument Panel Dimmer

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.

Dimmer Control

Fog Lights — If Equipped

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever.

Front Fog Light Control

NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights.


Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime

Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK.

NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating.

3


Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

Turn Signal Control

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash-

To-Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash-To-Pass function again.

Interior Lights

Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of the rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off from the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.


A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center console. You can turn this light on and off from the dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry

System.

Battery Saver Feature

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.

3

Courtesy/Reading Light Switches


WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low-speed wiper operation, or to the HI position for high-speed wiper operation.

Changing Wiper Speeds

NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the

“Park” position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.

CAUTION!

• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.

• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to

Changing Intermittent Settings

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.

If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

3


WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Mist Feature

Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.

The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Control


(Available With Auto Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) — if equipped. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.


Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off.

3


TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.


3

1 — ON/OFF

4 — CANCEL

2 — RES +

3 — SET -

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control


System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph

(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph

(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

3

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.


On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

The HomeLink 威 buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink 威 channels.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink 威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink 威 unit operates off your vehicle’s battery.

HomeLink 威 Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink 威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver.

Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the

Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.


Programming HomeLink 姞

Before You Begin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink

威 buttons, erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to

HomeLink 威 for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink 威 button you wish to program.

3


Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink 威 button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen

HomeLink

威 button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink

威 indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink

威 and handheld transmitter buttons.

Watch for the HomeLink 威 indicator to change flash rates.

When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to

30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you train.

NOTE:

• Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.

• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink 威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so, proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code

System.”

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink

威 button and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door (or device) should activate when the HomeLink 威 button is pressed.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming

A Rolling Code System.”

5. Programming A Rolling Code

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “Learn” or “Training” button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is

NOT the button normally used to open and close the door.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button


6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed

HomeLink

威 button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink 威 buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

3


Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink

威 to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming

HomeLink 威” Step 3, with the following:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink 威 button, while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink 威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time.

Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming

HomeLink 威,” earlier in this section.

Using HomeLink

姞

To operate, press and release the programmed

HomeLink 威 button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink 姞 Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

威 button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink 威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for

20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.


The HomeLink 威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink

威, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

3



This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse.

NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts

(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

The instrument panel power outlet, located below the climate control knobs, has power available only when the ignition is ON. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.

NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK position.

Instrument Panel Power Outlet

The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.


3

Center Console


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

2 — #11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.


CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED

An optional ash receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder.

The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets. Refer to “Power

Outlets” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further information.

3


CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholder

The cupholder in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz. (.5 L) bottles or cans. The one-piece insert can be removed easily for cleaning. An optional removable ashtray may be located in one of the cupholders.

Rear Seat Cupholders

Cupholders for the rear seat occupants are located in the armrests. Each cupholder is capable of holding up to a

20 oz. (.5 L) bottle or can.

Rear Seat Cupholder

Front Cupholders


WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are place in the cupholder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury.

STORAGE

Glove Box Storage Compartment

The glove box storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. To open the glove box, pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of the glove box.

Glove Box Storage Compartment

CONSOLE FEATURES

Storage

The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats. The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort. The center console can be used for storage and

3

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE is also equipped with an electrical power outlet. Refer to

“Power Outlets” in “Understanding The Feature of Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Center Console

Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest.

Center Console Storage

The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet. The console’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.

NOTE:

• A notch in the front of the console base allows for use of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power outlet with the armrest latched down.

• The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in the optional cup holder ash receiver.


CARGO AREA FEATURES

The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly flat extension of the load floor.

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.

3

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.


WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback in not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

(Continued)


• To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.

• The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:

Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

Ski Pass-Through

There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis, to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through door.


3

Ski Pass-Through


REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 194

䡵 Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 208

▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

▫ Oil Change Required — If Equipped . . . . . . 213

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫ Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 218

䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo

Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer

(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 222

4

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD

And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 230

▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 232

▫ List Button

(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 235

▫ Info Button

(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 235

▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/

RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command

System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

▫ Operating Instructions

(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 241

䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 242

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 242

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 250

䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio

(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 251

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 261

▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 261

▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 266

▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB

Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 272

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 275

䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 276

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

4


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet

2 — Side Window Demister Outlet

3 — Instrument Cluster

4 — Ignition Switch

5 — Analog Clock

6 — Radio

7 — Passenger Airbag

8 — Glove Compartment

9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

10 — Hazard Switch

11 — Storage Compartment

12 — Climate Control

13 — Trunk Release Button

14 — Power Outlet

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER


4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when towing a trailer.

If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.

Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

2. Fuel Door Reminder

This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle.

3. Fuel Gauge

When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

4. Speedometer

Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

5. Low Fuel Light

When the fuel level drops to approximately 2.0 gallons (7.6 Liters), the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound.

NOTE: This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3.0 gallons (11.3 Liters) of fuel is added.

6. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices, such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster.

If the Charging System Light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local authorized dealer.


If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

7. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

8. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/

RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.

After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will

4

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

9. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON/RUN position, and the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE

THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.

The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.

This can be determined using the procedure shown in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

10. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To

Do In Emergencies” for further information.

11. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.


If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).

In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

4


The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

12. Tachometer

The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.

Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

13. Shift Lever Indicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from

PARK.

14. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area

The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer

reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.


Vehicle Odometer Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the odometer will display the following messages: door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar dECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Ajar

TOP nOT SECUrE . . . . . . . Convertible Top Not Secure

TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down

TOP FAIL . . Convertible Top Up/Down Operation Failed

SET CARgO SHIELd . . . . . The Convertible Top Cargo

Shield Must Be Put In The Stowed Position

SPEEd TOO HIgH . . . . . . . . Vehicle Speed Is Too High

For Convertible Top Up/Down Operation

TOP donE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible Top Up/Down

Operation Is Complete

TOP nOT SECUrE . . . . Convertible Top Is Not Secured

LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure

HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature

Exceeds Safe Threshold gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault

CHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required

4


NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and

“Trunk Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for specific messages).

Refer to “Convertible Top Operation” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” for a table that explains how long each message is displayed and the conditions under which each message is displayed.

LoW tirE

When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles.

HOTOIL

When this message is displayed there is a transmission over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime.

NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears. Raising the idle of the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the “gASCAP” message.

(Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information). If

the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible.

CHANgE OIL

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately

12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.

To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the

Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position

(do not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

4. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle


Information Center (EVIC)”.

4


15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed

Control System is ON.

16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button

Dual Trip Odometer

Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer.

To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approximately 2 seconds) until the display resets to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.

17. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may require towing. Immediate service is required.

The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check. This is normal. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

18. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver.

20. Turn Signal Indicators

The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.


21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

22. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

This light will flash rapidly for approximately

16 seconds when the alarm system is arming.

The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed. The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed.

23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped

This light monitors the ABS. This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the

ON/RUN position and may stay on for approximately three seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required, however,

4

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock

Brakes.

The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should come on. If the light does not come on, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer.

24. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles

(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to

ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)


As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

4


Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If

the bulb does not come on when turning the key from

LOCK to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.


WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If

Equipped

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

4


CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Display — If Equipped

This display shows the EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.

WARNING!

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

28. High Beam Indicator

This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.

MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED

The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information and temperature display.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

Control Buttons

Mini-Trip Control Buttons

STEP Button

Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).


RESET Button

To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the

ON position, then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel.

The following displays can be reset or changed:

• Trip A

• Trip B

Trip Odometer (ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.

Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

Trip B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.

4


ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status

• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays

• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

• Compass Heading Display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,

SW)

• Outside Temperature Display (°F or °C)

• Trip Computer Functions

• Audio Mode Displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD

Title and Track number when playing

• Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Displays (if equipped)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

MENU

Button


Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to Trip Functions or Personal Settings or to return to the default System Status display.

Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the various Trip Functions or Personal Settings.

4

DOWN

Button

Press and release the COMPASS button to display the compass heading and the outside temperature.

COMPASS

Button


SELECT

Button

Press and release the SELECT Button to accept a selection. The SELECT Button also resets various Trip Functions.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled)

• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

• RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a single chime)

• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park

• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion

• Left/Right Door Ajar (one or more doors open, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)

• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)

• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)

• Headlights On

• Key In Ignition

• Remote start aborted — Door ajar

• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar

• Remote start aborted — Trunk ajar

• Remote start aborted — Fuel low

• Remote start disabled — System fault

• Convertible Top Not Secured (with a single chime)

• Convertible Top Complete (with a single chime)

• Secure Cargo Shield (with a single chime)

• Speed Too High (with a single chime)

• Convertible Top Malfunction (with a single chime)

• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

• Low Pressure (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire

Pressure Monitoring System ⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating ⬙.

• Check TPM System (with a single chime) Refer to ⬙Tire

Pressure Monitoring System ⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙.


Oil Change Required — If Equipped

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine.)

4


2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.


NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

Trip Functions

Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

• Average Fuel Economy

• Distance To Empty

• Elapsed Time

• Display Units of Measure in

Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the Trip Functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display.

This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

• Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,

RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW

FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.


• Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.

Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

• Display Units In:

To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

To Reset The Display

Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed. Press and hold the SELECT button once to clear the function currently displayed.

To reset all resettable functions, press and release the

SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will display during this three-second window).

4


Compass Display

COMPASS

Button

The compass heading indicates the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the compass button to display one of eight compass heading and the outside temperature.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the

EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal, you may wish to calibrate the compass manually. However, prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance value is selected (Refer to

“Compass Variance” for additional information). Then continue to calibrate the compass as follows:

1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.

2. Press and release the MENU Button until “Personal

Settings” displays in the EVIC.

3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Calibrate

Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.


4. Press and release the SELECT Button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing.

5. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic

North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic

North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure:

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,

Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the shift lever in PARK.

2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal


4


3. Press and release the DOWN button until “Compass

Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the

EVIC.

4. Press and release the SELECT button to increment the

Variance Value by one, (one button press per update), until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map.

NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.

5. Press and release the MENU button to exit. Press the

DOWN button if you wish to calibrate the compass manually (Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration”).

Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until “Personal


Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features:

Language

When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.

Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects

English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.

Auto Unlock On Exit

When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the

SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.

RKE Unlock

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver

Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door

1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

Sound Horn with LOCK

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with

LOCK feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.


Flash Lamps with LOCK

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the

RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with LOCK feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.

Headlamp Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears.


(Available with Auto Headlights Only)

When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned

4

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle.”

Key Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.

Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.

To make your selection, press the SELECT button until

OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears.

Illumin. Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press the SELECT button until

“OFF,” “30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped

When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to

“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And

Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the

SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.

Display ECO — If Equipped

The “ECO” message is located in the EVIC, this message can be turned on or off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

Display Units In

The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

Calibrate Compass

Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

Compass Variance

Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.


SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK

4

To set the analog clock, located at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button in until the setting is correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held.


MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO

RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER

(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

Media Center 230 (REQ)

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If

Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the

Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.


If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped


(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the




TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.

4


Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.

INFO Button

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.


MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

16-Digit Character Display Program Type

No program type or undefined

Adult Hits

Classical

Classic Rock

College

Country

Foreign Language

None

Adlt Hit

Classicl

Cls Rock

College

Country

Language

4


Program Type

Information

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Personality

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rock

Soft Rhythm and Blues

Sports

Talk

16-Digit Character Display

Inform

Jazz

News

Nostalga

Oldies

Persnlty

Public

R & B

Rel Musc

Rel Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rck

Soft R & B

Sports

Talk

Program Type

Top 40

Weather


Top 40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.

• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).

• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:

• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).

• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).


• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).

NOTE:

• The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc.

• These selections can only be made while playing a

DVD.

• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and

OFF (if equipped).

• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if equipped).

• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

4


• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.

Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.

• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.

Menu Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙

Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Audio Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting

⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitle Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle

Off or On.

Audio DRC — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to

⬙High,⬙ and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is

⬙Normal.⬙

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay — If Equipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.


NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.

AM and FM Buttons

Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

4


You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISC Button

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and

MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!

The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate

“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components.


LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)

Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays

⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.

Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is reading the disc.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.

The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.


Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the

CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show

⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all

CDs will be ejected from the radio.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEK Button (CD MODE)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in

CD and MP3/MWA modes.

4


SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

TIME Button (CD MODE)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.

AM or FM Button (CD MODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable

MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.

When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,

DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255

• Maximum number of folders: 100

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)


Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/

WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing ⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/

WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.


If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and

MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/

WMA tracks on that disc.

Supported MP3/WMA File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

4


MPEG

Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

WMA

Specification


Bit Rate (kbps)

WMA 44.1 and 48

48, 64, 96, 128,

160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

Playback of MP3/WMA Files

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time ⬙ priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.


Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

4


SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

Operating Instructions — Voice Command System

(If Equipped)

For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the


Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone

(If Equipped)

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment

System (VES)™ (If Equipped)

Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the


Dolby 威

Manufactured under license from Dolby 威 Laboratories.

⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby 威 Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS™

⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If

Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite


Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

4


Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode

Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia

(Satellite) Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.


SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFO Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the

Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

4


TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.


Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.


(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.


Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.


Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).


MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/

RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit’s faceplate.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or

RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions

(Voice Command System) — If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User


4

Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —

If Equipped

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User



MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)


Media Center 130 (RES)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode



Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.


The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.









SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

4

TUNE Control











AM/FM Button

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.


Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC Button

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.


• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

4


CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism.

• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK Button


CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button


RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or

RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.


Notes on Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.


The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.







• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

4



• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)






CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing ⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rate.

MPEG

Specification


Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.



Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:


CD-R media




4



The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.


Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is

OFF).

MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

(SALES CODE RES+RSC)


Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode



Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.


The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.

Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —

If Equipped


(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.



4


Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped


(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.



TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.








SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.

For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the

SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

INFO Button

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE Control










4




Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

16-Digit Character Display Program Type

No program type or undefined

Adult Hits

Classical

Classic Rock

None

Adlt Hit

Classicl

Cls Rock

Program Type

College

Country

Foreign Language

Information

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Personality

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rock


College

Country

Language

Inform

Jazz

News

Nostalga

Oldies

Persnlty

Public

R & B

Rel Musc

Rel Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rck

Program Type

Soft Rhythm and Blues

Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather


Soft R&B

Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.


(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.


SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FM Button


SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

4

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/

RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.


Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUX Button

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.


Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.


• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism.

• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.

• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

4

CAUTION!

• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

(Continued)

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.


A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK Button


CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button


RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button


SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.


The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.







• Maximum number of folder levels: 8



• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)






CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

4


Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing ⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

MPEG

Specification


Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.


Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:


CD-R media





LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

4

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time ⬙ priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.


Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.


The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.


Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —

If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode

Press the SAT button until

⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

4

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.


Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia

(Satellite) Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFO Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an

additional three seconds will make the radio display the

Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.


Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.


Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.


(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

4

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.


SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.


Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.


Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone

(If Equipped)

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The

Features If Your Vehicle”.

iPod 姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/

REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code

RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio iPod

威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate

RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.

iPod

威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios.

This feature allows an iPod 威 or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.

iPod

威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and iPhone

威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not fully support the iPod

威 control features. Please visit

Apple’s website for software updates.

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate

Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod 威 or external USB device support capability.

• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod 威 /MP3 control feature to control the connected device.


Connecting The iPod 姞 Or External USB Device

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod 威 or external

USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.

4

USB Connector Port


Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s iPod 威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod

威/USB/

MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.

Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod 威/USB/

MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to

USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.

• The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod 威 contents.

• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device)

Controlling The iPod

姞 Or External USB Device

Using Radio Buttons

To get into the iPod 威/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say

⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.

Play Mode

When switched to iPod 威/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod 威 or external USB device automatically starts Play

mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod 威 or external

USB device and display data:

• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track or press the

VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF >> button.


• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list, or press the VR button and say

⬙Next or Previous

Track

⬙.

• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat

Off ⬙.

4


• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the

SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the

<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.

• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod 威 or external USB device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or

⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.

• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable.

• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in

“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward

(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod

威 or external USB device.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

• Preset 3 – Albums

• Preset 4 – Genres

• Preset 5 – Audiobooks

• Preset 6 – Podcasts


• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode .

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod 威 or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod 威 or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.

4


CAUTION!

• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.

• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device, or connections to the iPod 威 or external USB device in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod 威 or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the

Uconnect™ phone system.

Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons

To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth

Streaming Audio”.

Play Mode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™ phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the

Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected and played.

Selecting Different Audio Device

1. Press PHONE button to begin.

2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.

3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the

Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.

Next Track

Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone.

Previous Track

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone.

Browse

Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.


STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

Remote Sound System Controls

(Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o’clock positions.

4


The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.

The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.


NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.

4


Manual Heating And Air Conditioning

Manual Temperature Control

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

Blower Control

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “O”

(OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) position.

Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser.

Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.


Mode Control (Air Direction)

Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.

The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.

4

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.


NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.

This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in

Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air

Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

Recirculation Control

Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause

the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off.

NOTE:

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.

• Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor, Mix or Defrost modes. If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these modes, the LED indicator will flash

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 several times then go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically is these modes are selected.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

Air Conditioning Control

Press this button to engage the Air

Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

4


• MAX A/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time.

• ECONOMY MODE

If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn

OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped

Automatic Temperature Control

Automatic Operation

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

Operation of the system is quite simple.

1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the

Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.

2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.

72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.

4

NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation.

• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in

AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.


• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

• While operating in AUTO, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. The defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

Blower Control

For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation, turn the knob to the AUTO position. In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,

Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.

The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control

Operation Chart that follows for details.



The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.

This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

• Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

• Air Conditioner Control

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.

• Recirculation Control

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation

Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.


NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.

Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow

Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or

Mix mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

4


• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation

Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into

Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Mix and then press the

Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur.

Side Window Demisters

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the

FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors.


Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.

4


Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –20°F Or

⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 297

䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 300

▫ Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

5

290 STARTING AND OPERATING


䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped . . . . . . 317

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 319

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 327

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 328

䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 342

䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 343

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 348


䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 354

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

5


䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel

Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 359

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ Loose Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 364

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 364

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

▫ Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375


䡵 Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Towing This Vehicle

Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

5


STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!


• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

Automatic Transmission

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position, and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of

PARK.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start (Four-Speed

Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

For vehicles equipped with Tip Start (Six-Speed Transmission), turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal

Starting” procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or

⫺29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start


WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.

This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

5


Without Tip Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.

With Tip Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.


The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine.

After Starting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift the shift lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

(Continued)

5



• Shift the shift lever into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.

• Do not shift the shift lever from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting the shift lever into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting the shift lever out of PARK.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

(Continued)


• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle.


Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock

Systems

These systems prevent the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. They also prevent shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the

ON or START position and the brake pedal is applied.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position. Once the key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

5


Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the

PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or

START position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Four-Speed/Six-Speed Automatic Transmission

The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles/kilometers.

Shift Lever

Gear Ranges

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.

Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.


When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever into the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.


• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the ignition key in the ignition switch. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

5


NEUTRAL

This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition switch to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

DRIVE – Six-Speed Transmission

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts, and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick

威 mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range. For example: When operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions, reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick

威 will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

DRIVE – Four-Speed Transmission

This range should be used for most city and highway driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts, and best fuel economy. However, select the ⬙3⬙ range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong headwinds, or while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions, using the ⬙3⬙ range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.


DRIVE 3 — Four-Speed Transmission

This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear.

Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds. The

⬙3⬙ range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress

NOTE: Using the

⬙3⬙ range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.

LOW — Four-Speed Transmission

This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections.

CAUTION!

If the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits, the vehicle computer may override the manually selected gear position by changing shift points. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission

The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear (third gear for six–speed). The transmission remains in second gear (third gear for six–speed) despite the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-

TRAL will continue to operate. The Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

5


In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the shift lever into PARK.


4. Restart the engine.

5. Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and resume driving.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is required.

AUTOSTICK 姞 — IF EQUIPPED

AutoStick 威 is a driver-interactive feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick

威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the AutoStick 威 posiition (below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.

This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.

NOTE: In AutoStick 威 mode, the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right (+) or left (-), or as described below.

AutoStick

威 is deactivated when the shift lever is moved from the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE position.


• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except sixth.

The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

• If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio.

• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+) once.


• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is engaged.

• The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick

威 is engaged.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick

威 is engaged.

• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.

Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio, however.

• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.

• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the

AutoStick 威 mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.

5


DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water


Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.

(Continued)

5



• Driving through standing water may cause dam- age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination

(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

STARTING AND OPERATING 309 system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

5

310 STARTING AND OPERATING checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.


NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

5


WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.


• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)


• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.


ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.


• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

WARNING!

• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

(Continued)

The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that

5

314 STARTING AND OPERATING service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake

Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock

Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake

(ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. See your authorized dealer.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop),

• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,

• brake pedal pulsations,

• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System

(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work

STARTING AND OPERATING 315 together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as

ESC.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and

Operating” for further information.

5

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is

316 STARTING AND OPERATING spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability

Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied.

During operation, HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.


HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped

• Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

5

WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than

7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.


The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.

The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears, and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.

HSA Off

Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this procedure:

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within

90 seconds.

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Release the clutch pedal.

6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.

7. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times.

8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right.

9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it’s previous setting.

EVIC Equipped Vehicles

HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition


• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.

ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an

ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

5


ESC Operating Modes

All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes:

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode.

This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial ESC Mode

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC

Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank below the heater/air conditioning controls). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally, with the exception of engine power reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.

ESC Off Switch

To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

WARNING!

In partial ESC mode, the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.


ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

5


Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety

Standards Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

STARTING AND OPERATING 323 tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

5


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T = Temporary spare tire

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire

10.5

= Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

—

⬙R⬙ means radial construction

— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)


EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire

Light Load = Light load tire

C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

5


Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001

— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-Pillar

Cold Tire Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard


Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running from the sill to the roof.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or

KPa (kilopascals).

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure.

5


Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) total weight your vehicle can carry

3) tire size designed for your vehicle

4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

STARTING AND OPERATING 329 axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

5


3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five

150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs

[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).



WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re- sult in over-heating and tire failure.

• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob- lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)


• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.


Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information” section of this manual.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

5


CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.


Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

5

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).


Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and

Wheel – If Equipped

The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in

“Starting and Operating” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.

Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time


WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

5

Full Size Spare – If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

338 STARTING AND OPERATING your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.


Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

5


Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

WARNING!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.

The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.


WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

(Continued)


• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS

Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.

5


SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the

M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

Tire Rotation


TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about

1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

5


The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately

27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.


NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.”

5


• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a

⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and ⬙LOW

TIRE ⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Check TPMS Warning

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.


5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:

1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON and a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5


4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System – If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel-wells)

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.


5


Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate all tires with low pressure (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

Check TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-

TEM ⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will no longer flash, and the

⬙CHECK TPM

SYSTEM

⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.


The EVIC will also display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the

⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.

The system still needs to be serviced as long as the

⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.

NOTE:

1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “Tire Pressure

5


Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a

⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.


This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:


• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B

Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

STARTING AND OPERATING 353 as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

5

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.


The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing

Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

• poor engine performance

• poor cold start and cold driveability

• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with

E-85 perform the following:

• change the engine oil and oil filter

• disconnect and reconnect the battery

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

STARTING AND OPERATING 355 therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the

United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost.

Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

5


Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)


• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.


Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)


• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —

IF EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un- leaded Gasoline Only.

This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to

5

358 STARTING AND OPERATING the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and

15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 Fuel Cap

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.

Fuel Requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full

• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling

• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.


NOTE:

• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed.

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR 威 Injector Cleanup or

Techron may be used.

5

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR 威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting

Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the

360 STARTING AND OPERATING requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to

Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR

威 or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon

(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement Parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION!

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle.


Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Door

5


After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s surface.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap).

• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc- tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Tether Cable

NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.

(Continued)


• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.


Loose Filler Cap Message

If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

5

NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

VEHICLE LOADING

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver’s door.


The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s

GVWR.


Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

5


To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section, please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its

⬙loaded and ready for operation

⬙ condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.


Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.

5


Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - Medium

Duty

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry

Standards

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty

Class IV - Extra

Heavy Duty

5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.


Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission

2.4L/Auto

3.6L/Auto

Max. Frontal Area

See Note 2

Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings

22 sq.ft. (2.0 sq.m)

Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.)

1,000 lbs (450 kg)

2,000 lbs (900 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.

(See Note 1)

100 lbs (45 kg)

200 lbs (90 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Note 1: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Note 2: Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with all four-cylinder engines with automatic transmission. Please see your authorized dealer for additional information.

5


CAUTION!

Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme conditions.

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer

Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and

Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in increased yaw or vehicle instability. A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability. Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition.


Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.

This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

5


WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.

• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.

(Continued)


• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.

Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

(Continued)


3. GAWR

4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve 10% of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

Towing Requirements – Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.


• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and

GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

5


• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly — including hazard flashers.


The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, select the

“3” range (for a four-speed automatic) or select a lower gear (using the AutoStick 威 feature, for a six-speed).

NOTE: Using lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This action will also provide better engine braking.


If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission fluid level before towing. The AutoStick

威 six-speed transmission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked.

See your authorized dealership service center for assistance.

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

5


• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

• City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

• Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

• Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING

(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Recreational towing is not allowed.

CAUTION!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

▫ Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only

(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

6

378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel, below the radio.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only

(If Equipped)

During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph

(85 km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.

NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at the maximum. You may of course, reduce your speed further if needed.

6


JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.

(Continued)


• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk.

Spare Tire Stowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk.

Spare Tire Removal

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.


WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

Spare Tire and Jack Stowage

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6


6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

(Continued)


• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

(Continued)


• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.


CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

NOTE: Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of

Tires--General Information--for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

6

Jack Warning Label


NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.

2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3.

3. There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle.

Removing Jack Handle From Jack


Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.

6


WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Mounting Spare Tire

WARNING!

• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.

Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is

100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.


9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.

10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required.

6


Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap

1 — Valve Stem

2 — Valve Notch

3 — Wheel Lug Nut

4 — Wheel Cover

5 — Mounting Stud

3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!


5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.


6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

Vehicles Without Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

6


WARNING!


3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.


CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.

Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)

2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

6


WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive

(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

Locking Tab

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.


1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.

6


5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).

Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.


NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), turn the system to Partial OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be- tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

6


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the cupholder liner.

3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position without starting the engine.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the front of the cupholder and push and hold the override lever forward.

6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the cupholder liner.


TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Wheels OFF the Ground

NONE

Rear

ALL MODELS

If transmission is operable:

• Trans in NEUTRAL

• 25 mph (40 km/h)max speed

• 15 mi (24 km) max distance

OK

BEST METHOD Flatbed

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.

Front

ALL

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

6


CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.

Damage to the fascia will occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.

• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON position, not the LOCK or ACC positions.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.

• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi

(24 km).

• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 mi (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).

CAUTION!

Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than

15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

6

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 405

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 405

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

7

402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

▫ Cleaning Center Console Cupholders . . . . . . 438

▫ Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top . . . . 440

䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 441

䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

▫ Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 452

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

7 — Air Cleaner Filter

8 — Engine Oil Fill

9 — Coolant Pressure Cap

10 — Engine Oil Dipstick

11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

4 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

5 — Air Cleaner Filter

6 — Engine Oil Dipstick

7 — Engine Oil Fill

8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed. A “GASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer

“Reset” button to turn off the message. If the problem

7

406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.


Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR 威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR 威 parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

7

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for

408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per- form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center.

(Continued)


• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

7


CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.


Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.6L Engine

SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

7


Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Materials Added To Engine Oils

Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR 威 engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.


Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR

威 engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to

_Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield.

7


WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

7


Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System

Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter – If Equipped


WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result.

The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.

2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door.

3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.

Once disconnected, the dampener will retract underneath the instrument panel if you release it.

4. Pivot the glove box downward.

5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.


CAUTION!

The A/C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often.

A/C Air Filter Replacement

6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as

MOPAR

威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to

7

418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE hood latching components to ensure proper function.

When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR

威

Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.

Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.


Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

7


WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un- leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.


To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

7


Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every

12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).



Selection Of Coolant

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

(Continued)


• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant

(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before

7

424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula

HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant changes.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.

To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

Four-Cylinder Engines – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the bottle.

Six-Cylinder Engines – the level of the engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.

7


The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.

Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles

(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at

50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components.


• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically.


WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.

7


Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.

Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)



• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.

Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.

This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)


• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami- nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.


The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing.

The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid.

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

7


Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to

“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Special Additives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check – 2.4L Engine

Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly:

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of

60 seconds.

3. Apply the parking brake fully.

4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the lever in PARK.

5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.

6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80° F (27° C).

7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then, remove dipstick and note the reading.

a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).

b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”

If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill.

7


CAUTION!

• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu- facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly.

Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine

The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only.

Transmission Fluid And Filter Changes


In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap, and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.


Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR

威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR

威 Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威

Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

7


CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR

威

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR

威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.


To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

7


• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose

Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.

Cleaning Interior Trim

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR 威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR 威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or

Armor All 威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

Cleaning Leather Upholstery

MOPAR

威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR 威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR 威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.


Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

7


Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

Cleaning Center Console Cupholders

Removal

Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward.

Cleaning

Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.

Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.

Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.

Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.

Installation

Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.

Convertible Top Care

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam- age the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.

• Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.

• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.

Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.

Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment.

Washing

Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material. If you must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are preferred.


General Cleaning

Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent.

CAUTION!

Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.

CAUTION!

Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.

Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area.

Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from

7

440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.

Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local dealership for further suggestions.

Additional Cleaning Procedure

For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains, apply MOPAR 威 Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches

(50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.

Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it.

Protection

For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your cloth top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard

威 is suggested. The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant.

CAUTION!

Avoid getting Scotchguard

威 on the surrounding weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to these items might occur.

Weather Strip Care – Soft And Hard Top

Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodically with MOPAR

威 Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable.


FUSES

Totally Integrated Power Module

The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for

FUSES/TIPM location.

Cavity

1

2

Totally Integrated Power Module

Cartridge

Fuse

40 Amp

Green

Mini

Fuse

—

Description

Power Top Module –

If Equipped

—

20 Amp

Yellow

AWD Module

7


Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

3

4

5

6

7

8

—

—

—

—

—

—

10 Amp

Red

10 Amp

Red

20 Amp

Yellow

10 Amp

Red

30 Amp

Green

30 Amp

Green

Description

Center High

Mounted Stop Light

(CHMSL)/Brake

Switch

Ignition Switch

Trailer Tow – If

Equipped

Power Mirror

Switch/Climate Controls

Ignition Off Draw

(IOD) Sense 1

Ignition Off Draw

(IOD) Sense 2

Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse

9

10

11

12

13

14

40 Amp

Green

—

—

—

—

—

Mini

Fuse

20 Amp

Yellow

—

Description

Battery Feed – Power

Seats – If Equipped/

PZEV Air Pump – If

Equipped

Instrument Panel/

Power Locks/Interior

Lights

Selectable Power Outlet (Inside Center

Arm Rest)

15 Amp

Lt Blue

20 Amp

Yellow

20 Amp

Yellow

10 Amp

Red

Ignition

Instrument Panel

Cavity

15

Cartridge

Fuse

40 Amp

Green

16

17

18

19

20

21

—

—

40 Amp

Green

—

—

—

Mini

Fuse

—

Description

15 Amp

Lt. Blue

10 Amp

Red

—

20 Amp

Yellow

15 Amp

Lt. Blue

10 Amp

Red

Radiator Fan Relay

Cigar Lighter/

Sunroof – If

Equipped

Wireless Control

Module (WCM)/

Clock/Steering Control Module (SCM)

Auto Shutdown

(ASD) Relay

Audio Amplifier – If

Equipped

Radio

Siren – If Equipped

Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse

22

23

24

25

26

—

—

—

—

—


Mini

Fuse

10 Amp

Red

15 Amp

Lt. Blue

25 Amp

Natural

10 Amp

Red

15 Amp

Lt. Blue

Description

Ignition Run – Climate Controls/Hot

Cupholder – If

Equipped

Auto Shutdown

(ASD) Relay 3

Sunroof – If

Equipped

Ignition Run —

Heated Mirrors - If

Equipped

Auto Shutdown

(ASD) Relay 2

7


Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

27

28

29

30

31

—

—

—

—

—

10 Amp

Red

10 Amp

Red

—

20 Amp

Yellow

10 Amp

Red

Description

Ignition Run – Occupant Classification

Module (OCM)/

Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC)

Ignition Run — Occupant Classification

Module (OCM)/

Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC)

Hot Car (No Fuse

Required)

Ignition Run –

Heated Seats – If

Equipped

Headlamp Washer –

If Equipped

Cavity

32

Cartridge

Fuse

30 Amp

Pink

33

34

—

30 Amp

Pink

Mini

Fuse

—

10 Amp

Red

—

Description

Auto Shutdown

(ASD) Relay 1

Switch Bank/

Diagnostic Link

Connector/

Powertrain Control

Module (PCM)

Anti-Lock Brakes

(ABS) Module – If

Equipped/Electronic

Stability Control

(ESC) Module – If

Equipped

Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse

35

36

37

40 Amp

Green

30 Amp

Pink

—

Mini

Fuse

—

—

25 Amp

Natural

Description

Anti-Lock Brakes

(ABS) Module – If

Equipped/Electronic

Stability Control

(ESC) Module – If

Equipped

Passenger Door Module (PDM)/Driver

Door Module (DDM)

Power Top Module –

If Equipped


CAUTION!

• When installing the Totally Integrated Power

Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally

Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.

The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

7


VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than

21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.

• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution

Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).

• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.

Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W

Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp. . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W

Visor Vanity Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220

Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220

Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IKLE14140

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.

Bi-Halogen Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIR2

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457AK

Front Park Lamp . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11

Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp . . . . . LED


Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED


Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

License Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W


NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the totally integrated power module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlamp on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the lamp assembly and grasp the connector.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamp

1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector behind the headlamp.

7


3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull outward from assembly.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life.

5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.

Front Turn Signal

1. Raise and prop open the hood.

2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing.

3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.

4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Front Fog Lamp

NOTE: Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield.


1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

7


Backup Lamps

1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the tail lamp.

2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp housing.

NOTE: Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic grommet from inside the trunk can assist in lamp removal.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp housing.

4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.

5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.


License Plate Lamp 2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.

1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate)

All Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV)

2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle)

16.9 Gallons

18.5 Gallons

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts

3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)

Cooling System*

2.4L Engine (MOPAR

威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5

Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

3.6L Engine (MOPAR

威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5

Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

6 Quarts

7.7 Quarts

11.6 Quarts

Metric

64 Liters

70 Liters

4.4 Liters

5.6 Liters

7.3 Liters

11 Liters

7


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component

Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

MOPAR 威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of

Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

MOPAR

威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine except

PZEV*

Spark Plugs – 2.4L with PZEV*

Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine

ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

ZFR5AP (Gap 0.031 in [0.8 mm])

RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

Fuel Selection 87 Octane

* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle

Chassis

Component

Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir


Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

MOPAR 威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed

ATF+4 威 product.

MOPAR 威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.

MOPAR

威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4 威 product.

7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 458

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

456 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 457

At Each Stop For Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Once A Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

8,000 miles (13 000 km).

Odometer Reading

Repair Order #

Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date

Dealer Code


16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule



16,000 miles (26 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or

12 months.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code


D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or

18 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule



24,000 miles (39 000 km).

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.





Schedule



32,000 miles (52 000 km).

❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.



❏ Adjust parking brake on all vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.


Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code

40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or





40,000 miles (65 000 km).

Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code



Schedule



48,000 miles (78 000 km).







N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8




D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or





56,000 miles (91 000 km).





Schedule



64,000 miles (104 000 km).




❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.


❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.


Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code

72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or





72,000 miles (117 000 km).



Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code



Schedule



80,000 miles (130 000 km).



❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104,000 miles (169 000 km).



N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8




D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or





88,000 miles (143 000 km).





Schedule



96,000 miles (156 000 km).



❏ Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary. †








Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code

104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or





104,000 miles (169 000 km).

❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV

Engine Only).

❏ Flush and replace engine coolant at

104,000 miles (169,00 km) or 60 months

(whichever occurs first).

Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code



Schedule



112,000 miles (182 000 km).





N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8




D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or





120,000 miles (195 000 km).



❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).





Schedule



128,000 miles (208 000 km).







Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code

136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or





136,000 miles (221 000 km).

Odometer Reading

Repair Order #


Date

Dealer Code



Schedule



144,000 miles (234 000 km).







N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8




D

U

L

E

S

H

E

S

C

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or





152,000 miles (247 000 km).




† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.


N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 474

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 474

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

9

472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

9


This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 247–9753

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

9


We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group

LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR 姞 PARTS

MOPAR 威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–

9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

9


• Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group

LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

9


Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

10

482 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Accessory Delay, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 423

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 413

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,416

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,280,415

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62,66,81,195

Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60,62

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,203

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,263

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,451

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 201,213

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 280

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,297,429

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432,453

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432

Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,300

Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Automatic Transmission

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

INDEX 483

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25

Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,80

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,453

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Brake/Transaxle Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 78

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,447

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,446

10

484 INDEX

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,411

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,357

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111,275

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,69,73,75

Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,73

Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,224,243,252

Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,216

Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Connector

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 266

Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 424

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,425

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 423,451,452

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,438

INDEX 485

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,278,284

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Dipsticks

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

10

486 INDEX

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Driving

On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 169

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 210

Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Emergency, In Case of

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 406

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,452

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,357

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,451

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,451,452

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,213,410

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,411

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,451

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 63

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,357

INDEX 487

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,419

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,361

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,416

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,452

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,162,450

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

10

488 INDEX

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,359

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,432

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,453

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,453

Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 452

Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,160,203,449

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,361

Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,452

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,451

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,363,405

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,26,141,352

General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,367

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,366

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

INDEX 489

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or

Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158,447

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 162

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,167

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158

Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

10

490 INDEX

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 162

Hitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 172

Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,194

Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,163

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,382

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 162,203,450

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 71,73

Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,446

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,157

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62,66,81,195

INDEX 491

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . 157,162

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 321

Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,203,449

Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 159,167

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

10

492 INDEX

High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 206

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 205,343

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,157,162,203,449,450

Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 194

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,365

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,73

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 206,406

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,214

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,476

MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

INDEX 493

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,60,63

Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,202

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,213

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,213

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,452

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,213,410

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,452

10

494 INDEX

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,451

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,451

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,406

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,477

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 151

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 328

Power

Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 178

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Programming Transmitters

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 424

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

INDEX 495

Remote Control

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 273

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 201,213

Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

10

496 INDEX

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,263

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,42,80

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69,75

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 423,452

Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,224,243,252

Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Shifting

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 287

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,162,450

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,338,380

Specifications

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 169,202

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

INDEX 497

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,294

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Steering

Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound

System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,446

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 56

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

10

498 INDEX

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 280

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 194,379

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 328

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,332,479

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 343

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,332

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

INDEX 499

Transaxle

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,297,429

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Transmitter Battery Service


Transmitter Programming


Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 172

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

10

500 INDEX

Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,38

Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,162,203,450

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 192

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 266

Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,363,365

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,446

Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Warning Lights

(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Washer

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,167,419

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,278,284

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,167

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

INDEX 501

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Windstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

10

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

Chrysler Group LLC

11C27-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Owner's manual | Chrysler 200 CONVERTIBLE 2011 Owner`s manual

CONVERTIBLE

WARNING!

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

Related manuals

Table of contents

Owner's manual | Chrysler 200 CONVERTIBLE 2011 Owner`s manual

CONVERTIBLE

WARNING!

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

Related manuals

Chrysler

2011 200

Dodge

2010 Avenger

Chrysler

2011 300 Limited

Chrysler

300

Chrysler

2006 Sebring

Dodge

2013 Dart

Chrysler

2012 200

Table of contents